راهنمای محصول

ManualsBrandsSamsung Manualsdoor intercom systemsSAMSUNG ST10

ﺡﻭﺮﺸﻣ یﺎﻫ ﻞﻤﻌﻟﺍﺭﻮﺘﺳﺩ ﻞﻣﺎﺷ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭼﺮﺘﻓﺩ ﻦﻳﺍ

ﺖﻗﺩ ﻪﺑ ﺍﺭ ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻪﭼﺮﺘﻓﺩ ﻦﻳﺍ

ﺎﻔﻄﻟ .ﺖﺳﺍ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ ﺯﺍ ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ

،ﺮﺘﺸﻴﺑ ﺕﺎﻋﻼﻃﺍ ﺯﺍ ﯽﻫﺎﮔﺁ یﺍﺮﺑ .ﺪﻴﻨﮐ ﻪﻌﻟﺎﻄﻣ

.ﺪﻴﻨﮐ ﮏﻴﻠﮐ ﺮﻳﺯ یﺎﻫ ﻪﻤﮐﺩ ﺯﺍ ﯽﮑﻳ یﻭﺭ

User Manual

ST10

ﻊﻳﺮﺳ ﻉﺎﺟﺭﺍ

ﺐﻟﺎﻄﻣ ﺖﺳﺮﻬﻓ

ﻪﻴﻟﻭﺍ یﺎﻫﺩﺮﮑﻠﻤﻋ

ﻪﺘﻓﺮﺸﻴﭘ یﺎﻫﺩﺮﮑﻠﻤﻋ

یﺭﺍﺩﺮﺒﻤﻠﻴﻓ ﻭ یﺭﺍﺩﺮﺒﺴﮑﻋ یﺎﻫ ﻪﻨﻳﺰﮔ

ﺶﻳﺍﺮﻳﻭ/ﺶﺨﭘ

(ﺎﻳﺪﻣ ﯽﺘﻟﻮﻣ) یﺍ ﻪﻧﺎﺳﺭ ﺪﻨﭼ

ﺎﻫ ﺖﺳﻮﻴﭘ

ﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﺖﺳﺮﻬﻓ

ﺪﯿﻨﮐ ﮏﯿﻠﮐ ﺕﺎﻋﻮﺿﻮﻣ ﺯﺍ ﯽﮑﯾ یﻭﺭ

Summary of content (107 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ — ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣/‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﻴﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪©2009 SAMSUNG DIGITAL IMAGING CO., LTD.‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪DIS‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪﺍی )ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫] [‬ ‫) (‬ ‫*‬ ‫†‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ )ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﺭﺍ
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫● ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ‪٣٣‬‬ ‫● ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ( ‪۴۵‬‬ ‫● ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪۵٠‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ < s‬ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‬ ‫● ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۴۵‬‬ ‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ(‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ(‬ ‫‪) EV‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ‪۵٣‬‬ ‫‪) ACB‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑ
PAGE 9
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٠ .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ‪......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ ‪.................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪........................................................................ DIS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪.......................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪.................................................... (EV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪.......................................................... (ACB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ‪........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ‪.............................................................‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی )ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ( ‪٧٧ ....
PAGE 11
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺎﻻی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ )ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫● ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫● ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫● ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪١٣‬‬
PAGE 15
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫پ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )ﻟﻤﺲ(‬ ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫پ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ .
PAGE 16
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً ﺧﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ‪ X‬ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﺮﺯﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) a‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﻤﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪) Samsung Digital Camera Installer‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ (Samsung‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪My Computer ª Removable Disk ª DCIM ª‬‬ ‫‪ 100SSCAM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Windows 2000/Vista‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ My Computer ª Removable Disk ،‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ SDC‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪PMP‬‬ ‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ TXT‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪TEXT‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ”‪ “PMP” ،“MP3‬ﻭ ”‪ “TEXT‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Converter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪٢۵‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )]‪.(AVI ،WMV ،ASF ،MPG [MPEG-1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫● ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪(Mac‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ‪ Mac OS X‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ 10.3‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،PMP‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung Converter‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﺟﻠﻮی ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ d‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٣۶‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪a ،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪a ،‬‬ ‫‪ s‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪a ،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺗﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪a ،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪DIS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ ،(DIS‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪a ،‬‬ ‫‪ p‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.
PAGE 38
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ MPEG-4.AVI‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ v‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ )ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫● ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ۴٨٠ x ۶۴٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠ x ٣٢٠‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(۴١‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 40
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪ ۴٠ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫>‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪vdspaS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻏﺬی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪f ،v‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‪> f ،‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪vdspaS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ژﺳﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻑ ‪ ۶‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺘﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪spa‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪spaS‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ*‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫● ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ( ﺩﺭ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪vdpa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪apsd‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (۴٩‬ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ :AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﮐﺰ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪ :AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫)ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ(‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪dspa‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺧﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯی‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ژﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪(EV‬‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺗﺮ )‪(-‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺧﻨﺜﯽ )‪(0‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(ACB‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ« )‪ (ACB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ACB :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ACB :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،a‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ‪ ACB‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪ AEB‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪،v‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫>‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪:‬‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬ ‫‪vdp‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی(‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺮی(‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫)ﺭﻭﺯ(‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬ ‫‪sp‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ژﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫>‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ‪ ACB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪vdspa‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫)‪ :R‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :G ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :B ،‬ﺁﺑﯽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪f ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫> ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫‬‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺨﺶ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ > ﻳﺎ < ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ > ﻳﺎ < ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٩‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ١۶‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺯﻭﻡ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫> ﻳﺎ < ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬ ‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻓﮑﺘﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،(۴١‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫● ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﮕﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ(‪:‬‬ ‫‬‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‬‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫>‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪) ACB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪) A/V‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٩٠‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،A/V‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫● ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی )ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ MP3‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٢٣‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﭼﻨﺪﮐﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪a ،‬‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫● ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژی‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،MP3‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪AAA.mp3‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﺷﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪BBB.sdc‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ )ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ(*‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪Samsung.txt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1/2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪1/2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ‪ MP3‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺯﺳﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪MPt‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 86
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪MPt‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪(۵ ،۴ ،٣ ،٢ ،١ ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ :‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪1/2‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪1/2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ*‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ*(‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ(‪) .‬ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻪ(‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺣﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬ ‫● ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺩ ﺣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ s‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 92
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫● ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑُﺮﺱ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ١ SD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪،(Secure Digital) SD‬‬ ‫‪ (Secure Digital High Capacity) SDHC‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ (MultiMedia Card) MMC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫‪SLB-0937‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫‪ ٣/٧‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۵٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫)ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ً‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ ،a‬ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ‪ ،9M‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫●‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .
PAGE 99
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫‪ ١⁄٢/۵ CCD‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١/٠٢‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٩/٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٩/٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫● ‪ ١ - ١⁄٢,٠٠٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫● ‪ ،AEB‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ١⁄۴ - ١⁄٢,٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫● ﺷﺐ‪ ١۶ - ١⁄٢,٠٠٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ = ‪- ١٨/٩‬‬ ‫‪ ۶/٣‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣۵‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‪ ٣٨ - ١١۴ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪AE‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪
PAGE 100
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،H-‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،L-‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬ ‫● ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ :‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ RGB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬ ‫● ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،ACB :‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ
PAGE 101
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ١ SD‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪3456 x 2592‬‬ ‫‪١٩۴‬‬ ‫‪٣٧۶‬‬ ‫‪۵۴۶‬‬ ‫‪3456 x 2304‬‬ ‫‪٢٢١‬‬ ‫‪۴٢۶‬‬ ‫‪۶١١‬‬ ‫‪3456 x 1944‬‬ ‫‪٢۶۴‬‬ ‫‪۵١٠‬‬ ‫‪٧۴۴‬‬ ‫‪2592 x 1944‬‬ ‫‪٣۴٣‬‬ ‫‪۶٣٧‬‬ ‫‪٨٧٠‬‬ ‫‪PMP‬‬ ‫‪2048 x 1536‬‬ ‫‪۵٣٢‬‬ ‫‪٨٩۵‬‬ ‫‪١,٢١١‬‬ ‫‪1024 x 768‬‬ ‫‪١,٧١۶‬‬ ‫‪٢,٠۵٩‬‬ ‫‪٢,٣٧۶‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ )‪ ٩٠٠ ،SLB-0937‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ )‪ ،(SAC-47‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ )‪USB (SUC-C7H‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ ١٩ x ۶٠ x ٩١‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ١٢۴/٢‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪٪ ٨۵‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Samsung Converter ،Samsung Master ،Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ( ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪۵۴ ACB‬‬ ‫‪٢١ Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪۴٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪۵۵‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪۵۵‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ‪۵۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ‪۴۴‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫‪٧٣ DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﻨﺞ ‪١۴‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪Samsung Converter‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪٢۵‬‬ ‫‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪٢۶‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪٩۵‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ‪٩۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪٩۴‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪۶۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١۵‬‬ ‫ﻓﺒﻠﻢ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٢٨ Mac‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪٢١ Windows‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪۴٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭘﻠﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪۵١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴ
PAGE 105
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ‪٨۴‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪١٩‬‬ ‫‪٣۶ DIS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪٣۶‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪٣٢‬‬ ‫چ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪٧۵‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﮥ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١۵‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۵٩‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪٣۵‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪۴۶ ISO
PAGE 106
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻅ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ‪۴۵‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪۴۵‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ‪۴۶‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪۶۶‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪۵١‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﺨﻨﺪ ‪۵١‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪۶٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪۶٨‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ‪١٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪٣۴‬‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ‪۴٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ‪۴٧‬‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪۴٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ‪۴٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ‪۴٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ‪۶‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪۴٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی( ‪۵۶‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ
PAGE 107
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ‪ http://www.samsungcamera.com/‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،CE‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ‬ ‫)‪ (EC‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.